P3PC 2492 07arz0

‫‪P3PC-2492-07ARZ0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍً ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻜﻢ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪.fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ "ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ®‪ 7.0) Adobe® Acrobat‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﺃﻭ ®‪Adobe‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫®‪ 7.0) Reader‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﺗﻘﻔﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫(‬ ‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ®‪ Adobe Acrobat‬ﺃﻭ ‪. Adobe Reader‬‬
‫®‬ ‫®‬ ‫®‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ®‪ Adobe® Acrobat‬ﺃﻭ ®‪.Adobe® Reader‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ]ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ[ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻛﺭﺍً ﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻛﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ‪.fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺯﻭّ ﺩﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‬ ‫)ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ( )‪(PDF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ‪ fi-6400/fi-6800‬ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺯﻭّ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (ADF‬ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪.Setup DVD-ROM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺯﻭّ ﺩﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )*‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ fi-680PRF/PRB‬ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪) fi-680PRF/PRB‬ﻭﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪SCSI‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ fi-680PRF/PRB‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ‪.fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ‪ 200 /‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪100‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪fi-6400‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Kofax VRS‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(PDF) VRS‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪.Setup DVD-ROM‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ‪ 260 /‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪130‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪fi-6800‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪Scanner Central‬‬
‫‪ .Scanner Central Admin‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪Setup‬‬ ‫‪(PDF) Admin 4.0‬‬ ‫*‪ :1‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ A4 landscape‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ dpi 300/200‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪.DVD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Error Recovery Guide‬‬ ‫ﻛﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪(HTML‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪.Setup DVD-ROM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﺿﻣّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ‪.fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺭﻕ‪(PDF ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ‪ Setup .‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﺿﻣّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺑﺩ ًء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ Setup DVD-ROM‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.PDF‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺭﻕ‪(PDF ،‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ ‪ Windows Server‬ﻭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ ‪ SharePoint‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ISIS‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪ EMC Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Adobe‬ﻭ ‪ Acrobat‬ﻭ ‪ Reader‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫‪ Adobe Systems Incorporated‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Kofax‬ﻭ‪ VRS‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Kofax Limited‬‬
‫‪ PaperStream‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪ PFU Limited‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‬
‫‪PFU Limited‬‬
‫‪YOKOHAMA i-MARK PLACE, 4-4-5‬‬
‫‪,Minatomirai, Nishi-ku‬‬
‫‪Yokohama, Kanagawa, 220-8567, Japan‬‬
‫‪© PFU Limited 2009-2017‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
:‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬ ‫ ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬.‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
.‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
Windows Windows Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
(1*) XP Microsoft Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition
®
:‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬،‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
.‫ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻳﻧﺑﻬﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‬
Windows Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Server Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard ×64 Edition
2003 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard ×64
Edition .‫ﻳﻧﺑﻪ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﻧﺻﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
Windows (32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Vista (32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
(32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
(32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
(32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Windows (32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard

Server (64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
2008
Windows 7 (32/64-bit) Windows® 7 Home Premium

(32/64-bit) Windows® 7 Professional
(32/64-bit) Windows® 7 Enterprise
(32/64-bit) Windows® 7 Ultimate
5
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻳﻧﺎ ً ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.PaperStream IP‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬ ‫)*‪(1‬‬ ‫‪Server‬‬ ‫‪(64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2012‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit)Windows® 8‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit)Windows® 8 Pro‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪ PaperStream IP.‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 8 Enterprise‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit)Windows® 8.1‬‬
‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit)Windows® 8.1 Pro‬‬
‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 8.1 Enterprise‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 10 Home‬‬

‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 10 Pro‬‬
‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 10 Enterprise‬‬
‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 10 Education‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(64-bit) Windows Server® 2016 Standard‬‬

‫‪Server‬‬
‫‪2016‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪SharePoint‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft® Office SharePoint® Portal Server 2003‬‬
‫‪Microsoft® Office SharePoint® Server 2007‬‬
‫‪Microsoft® SharePoint® Server 2010‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫"‪."Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ )←( ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ[ ← ]ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺇﻧﺫﺍﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪36 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪38 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪2 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﻘﻭﺑﺔ ‪39 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪3 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ‪39 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪5 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪40 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪10 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻅﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ‪41 .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪11 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ‪41 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪12 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ‪42 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪15 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪44 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ‪17 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪3.1‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪45 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪18 ...................................................... ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪45 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫‪1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪20 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪47 ............................................................................. LCD‬‬ ‫‪1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ‪21 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ ‪22 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ‪48 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪24 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪49 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.10‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪25 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪49 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪1.11‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪26 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪56 ............................................................‬‬
‫‪1.12‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪28 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪62 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ‪29 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪62 ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪2.1‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ‪30 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪63 .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ‪30 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 4‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭّ ﻋﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪64 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ‪31 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪4.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺧﺹ‪65 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ‪36 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪4.2‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪66 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪36 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪120 ................................................. .‬‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪69 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‪121 ........................................................... .‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪73 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻅﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪122 ........................................ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ ‪78 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ‪123 .................................................................‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪79 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪123 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ( ‪81 ............................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪123 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ( ‪83 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ‪90 ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪125 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ‪125 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ‪91 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪126 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪92 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ‪94 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪127 .............................................. Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ‪97 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪8.2‬ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ‪128 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 7‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪99 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪128 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪7.1‬ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪100 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪131 ......................................................................................2‬‬
‫‪7.2‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪102 ..................................................................‬‬
‫‪8.3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‪139 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ‪103 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ‪139 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪105 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[ ‪142 ........................................................‬‬
‫‪7.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪109 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[ ‪142 ...................................‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪110 ............................................................................... .‬‬
‫‪8.4‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪143 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪111 .............................................................. .LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻭﻓﺳﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ[ ‪143 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‪112 ........................................................................................... .‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭّ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )‪145 ... [(ADF‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪113 ................... .‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭّ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ([ ‪146 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪114............................................ .‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ]ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ‪147 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭّ ﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪115...................................................................... .‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ]ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪148 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪116 ........................................................... .‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ[ ‪150 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪117 .............................................................. .‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪151 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﻗﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪119.................................................................................................... .ADF‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ[ ‪169 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ[ ‪151.................................‬‬
‫‪8.6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ‪170 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ ‪152 ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ‪170 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻁﻳﻑ[ ‪153 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[ ‪171 .................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺹ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ‪154 ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪8.7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪172 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪155 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ[ ‪172 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻪ[ ‪155 ..................................................‬‬
‫‪8.8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪173 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ[ ‪173 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[ ‪156..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ[ ‪174 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪157..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪175 ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ]ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪158........................................‬‬
‫‪A.1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪176 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ]ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪A.2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪178 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ([ ‪159.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪A.3‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪180 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺗﻡ ]ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ‪160.........‬‬
‫‪A.4‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ‪182 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ]ﻗﻁﻊ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪/‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ[ ‪161 ..................................................‬‬
‫‪A.5‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪183 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ[ ‪162.......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪184 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪8.5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪163 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪199 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[ ‪163 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ‪165 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[ ‪166..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪11 ................................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ 1.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪12 ..............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪15 ..........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ‪17 .............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪18 ............................................................................................................................ ADF‬‬
‫‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪20 ......................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ‪21 .....................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ ‪22....................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪24 .........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.10‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪25...........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.11‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪26 ................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1.12‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪28 ..................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 1‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 130‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ 260/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ )ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪(JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ‪ Kofax CGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CCD‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ "ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 130‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ 260/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .A4/Letter‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 60,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ )‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺴّﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺴﻨﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ" ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺴﻤﻚ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‪/‬ﻟﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ "‪ "Scanner Central Admin Agent‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀ ّﻤﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ "ﻣﻌﺒﺊ ﻣﺼﻌﺪ" ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺰ ّﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ"(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﻤﻚ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‪/‬ﻟﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﱡ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ "ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ" ﺳﺘﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ "ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻧﻈﻴﻔًﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ "ﺑﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﻳﻌﺒﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ "ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻛﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻟﻠﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺷﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬

‫ﻳﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻣﺯﻗﻬﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ LCD‬ﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﺗﻛﺩﺳﻬﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺗﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ") ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻣﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪/‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪) ADF‬ﻣﻠﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ‪) VRS Board‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ( ‪fi-6800‬‬

‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪) VRS Board‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ( ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) Kofax VRS‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ A.4‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ") ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(182‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪(fi-6800) SCSI‬‬

‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.SCSI‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪(fi-6800) SCSI ID‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ‪) SCSI ID‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪(5 :‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ 6.2 "،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(92‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ" ‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(94‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(97‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،SCSI‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬

‫‪ LCD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "|" ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻁﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ "‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪ ON‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺮّﻙ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(21‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﺮﻭﺓ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻓﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ADF‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ADF‬‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﺎﻟﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬

‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻋﺮﻭﺓ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻓﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﺎﻟﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Hopper Level :10‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[Lower :4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Eject‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺪ ﻳُﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ .[Ready‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻣﻦ ]‪ .[Hopper Level‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ] ‪Hopper‬‬
‫‪ [Level‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ 100‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫)*‪ (1‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ 300‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪/Pause‬‬ ‫‪/Back‬‬
‫)*‪ (1‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫)*‪ (1‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪iMFF‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Eject‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 80‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 20) 2‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ"‬
‫]‪ [Ready‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ]‪:18‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪ [Operation Panel Timeout‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ 1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﻌﺑﺊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺼﻴﺮًﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻟﻲ ‪ 130‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿّﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،A3‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[Movable :1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ )ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸ ُﻮﻩ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻌﺪﺓ( ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ُﻣﻌﺒﺊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Fixed :2‬ﻟـ ]‪.[Stacker Positioning :9‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌًﺎ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬

‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫‪ .Panel‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ[ "‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(172‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Paper Separation Force‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Paper Separation Force‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ .[Ready‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺻﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻀﺎ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻳ ً‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Eject‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Paper Separation Force‬ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻋﺎﻟﻲ"‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ready‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ]‪:18‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ [Operation Panel Timeout‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Paper Separation Force :11‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ 1.10‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺎ ًءﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺣ ّﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(171‬‬
‫ﻧﻔّﺬ ﺃﻣﺮًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ .Software Operation Panel‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ " ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(171‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ " 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(15‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪ 1.11‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬

‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ( ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪PaperStream IP (TWAIN‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪.TWAIN‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.TWAIN 64-bit‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪PaperStream IP (TWAIN x64‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪.TWAIN‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.TWAIN 64-bit‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪PaperStream IP (ISIS‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪.ISIS‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.ISIS‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪PaperStream Capture -‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ PaperStream IP (TWAIN‬ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪PaperStream IP‬‬
‫)‪(ISIS‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪.PaperStream IP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪PaperStream‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪.Capture‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻁﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻁﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷ ﱢﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،SCSI‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Ready‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪ 1.12‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ "‪"Scanner Central Admin‬؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪Scanner Central Admin Server‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﱢﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Scanner Central Admin Server‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scanner Central Admin Console‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﱢﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻭﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪ ،Scanner Central Admin Console‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫‪Scanner Central Admin Agent‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﱢﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪،Scanner Central Admin Server‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻣًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Scanner Central Admin Server‬ﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣ ّﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪.Scanner Central Admin 4.0‬‬ ‫‪SCAModule Creator‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Scanner Central Admin Server‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2.1‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪30 ................................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ‪36.................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 2.1‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ )ﺑﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ‪ 80‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ ]‪ 20‬ﺭﻁﻼً[‪ ,‬ﻭﺑﺴﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ‪ ,‬ﻭﺑﻮﺯﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 5‬ﻛﻎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(38‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ)‪ 1‬ﻭ)‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ" ) ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(39‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (42‬ﻭ"ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ"‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ " ‪Error‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(66‬‬
‫‪."Recovery Guide‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ Setup DVD-ROM‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪Error Recovery‬‬
‫‪ .Guide‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪Error Recovery‬‬
‫‪ ،Guide‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ" ﻓﻲ "ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺣ ّﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ( ﻣﺗﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺷﻕ ﺗﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﻭﺩﺑﺎﺑﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫■ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(22‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ( ﻣﺗﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺮّﻙ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺮّﻙ ﻛﻼ ﻣﺮﺷﺪﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(22‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺷﻕ ﺗﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻛﻼ ﻣﺭﺷﺩﻱ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ‬‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺷﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ A5 ‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ A4 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ‪ 20 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 5.4) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،A5‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ A4: 41‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 11) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 52‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 157‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪) 2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 14‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 42‬ﺭﻁﻞ(‬
‫ﺃ ‪ 52 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 304.8‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 2.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬

‫ﺏ ‪ 74 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 431.8‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 2.9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 17.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ()*‪(1‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3048‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 120‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﻣﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭ )ﻣﺛﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻅﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 7.2‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(102‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺻﻘﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (24‬ﻻﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﺗﻔﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻗﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻘﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ(‬
‫ﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺑّﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺟﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺛﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A8‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ‪ 304.8‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 12.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻧﻅﻑ ﻛﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪:‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﻭﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻓﻭﻳﻝ( ﻭﺃﻏﺷﻳﺔ ‪.OHP‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺳﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪ :‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻭﺭﻕ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺷﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺷﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻭﺭﻕ ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺻﻘﻭﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪209‬‬ ‫‪203‬‬ ‫‪157‬‬ ‫‪127‬‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪) 2‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8.3‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻁﻝ‬
‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪174‬‬ ‫‪135‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪26.7‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻛﻎ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﻘﻭﺑﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫*ﻗﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺽ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺯﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺟﺯء ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻫﻭ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ "ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ" ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻛﺷﻑ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ 20 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 5.4) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼ(ً‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 0.025 /‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.25‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 0.001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.010‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 1.38‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺿﻣﻥ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 1.38‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ 1% :‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 1.38‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻓﻭﻕ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻛﻝ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺳُﻣﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ 20 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 5.4) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 0.025 /‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.25‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 0.001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.010‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ 1% :‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 1.38‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺿﻣﻥ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 1.38‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻭﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .Software Operation Panel‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 8.5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(163‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻅﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ]ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 210) A4/Letter‬ﻣﻡ‪ 8.27/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ]ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(66‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A5 ‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ A4 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ‪ 20 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 5.4) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،A5‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ A4: 41‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 11) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺼﻨﱢﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻊ‪/‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻷﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻻ ﻳﻼﻣﺱ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 0.35‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 0.64‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 64‬ﻣﻢ ﻟﺒﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪64mm‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫‪B7‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪B6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪B5‬‬ ‫‪A4‬‬ ‫‪LTR‬‬ ‫‪B4‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪A3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪52.5‬‬ ‫‪64.3‬‬ ‫‪74.3‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬ ‫‪149‬‬ ‫‪182‬‬ ‫‪210‬‬ ‫‪216‬‬ ‫‪257‬‬ ‫‪279‬‬ ‫‪297‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪297‬‬ ‫‪A3‬‬
‫‪279‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬
‫‪257‬‬ ‫‪B4‬‬
‫‪216‬‬ ‫‪LTR‬‬
‫‪210‬‬ ‫‪A4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ‬

‫‪182‬‬ ‫‪B5‬‬
‫‪149‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪129‬‬ ‫‪B6‬‬
‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬
‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪B7‬‬
‫‪74.3‬‬ ‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪64.3‬‬ ‫‪B8‬‬
‫‪52.5‬‬ ‫‪A8‬‬
‫‪ DL: 11 × 17‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ :LTR‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪Letter‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ A8‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3.1‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪45....................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪49.................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪62...................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 3.1‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬
‫‪Check LED‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﻛﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺿﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ )ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ /50‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ (C‬ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪(1*) [Send to/Pause‬‬ ‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬ ‫ﻳﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Stop‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Clear/Back‬‬

‫ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪(1*) [Scan‬‬
‫ﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Eject‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪..‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Eject‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[iMFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Counter Reset‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Send to/Pause‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(73‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻁﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻭﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫)ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳ ً‬

‫ﺿﺎ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﻝ؛ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻔﻬﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﻝ "‪"1‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Send to/Pause‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﻝ "‪"3‬‬ ‫‪/Enter‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Clear/Back‬‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬

‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Eject‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Counter Reset‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻗﺩ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪ "J‬ﺃﻭ "‪."U‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(103‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‪ [Clear/Back‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Stop‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ "ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪.([Ready‬‬ ‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺋﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(48‬‬ ‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪ "E‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "F‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "C‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫"‪ "H‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪."L‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(105‬‬ ‫]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Main Menu‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻡ ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ"‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Function/Enter‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ] ‪Function‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.[Selection‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪.[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ"‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(62‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[Send to/Pause‬‬

‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ .[Send to/Pause‬ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Send to/Pause‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ " 3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(62‬‬
‫"ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ " )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(75‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪iMFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ iMFF‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [[iMFF‬ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪. .‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ .[Eject‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪, .‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟـ "ﻋﺎﺩﻱ" ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﻛﺷﻑ([ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ([‪.‬‬
‫‪1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ") ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪:.(24‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،2‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ .(49‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،iMFF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟـ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ" ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Main Menu‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :21‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :22‬ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ :23‬ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫‪ :3‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(50‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬ ‫‪ :4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬ ‫‪ :5‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ :6‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻓﺣﺹ‬ ‫‪ :7‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(51‬‬ ‫‪ :8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ :9‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‬
‫‪ :25‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪ :10‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ" ﻭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪ :11‬ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻓﺣﺹ‬ ‫‪ :12‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(53‬‬ ‫‪ :13‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ :14‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ :15‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪ :16‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :17‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :18‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪" .‬ﻓﺣﺹ‬ ‫‪ :19‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(55‬‬ ‫‪ :20‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :24‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Menu‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(56‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(56‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Main Menu‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫■ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬

‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Show/Clear Counters :23‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Show/Clear Counters‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻭﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬ ‫‪Send to Check‬‬
‫‪/Pause‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪/Back‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %95‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software‬‬
‫‪) .Operation Panel‬ﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪iMFF‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Eject‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %100‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) .Software Operation Panel‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ .%33‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﺜﺒﺘًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻟـ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫]‪([Ink Level: Front] / [Ink Level: Back‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Counter Reset‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪.[Counter Reset‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺩﻯ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes :1‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.100‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫■ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Doc Counting Mode :25‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ])‪ [Doc Counting Mode (More documents‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪ 100‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻛﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻫﻧﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬ ‫‪/Pause‬‬ ‫‪/Back‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﻳﻌﺭﺽ ]‪ [Count‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ "‪."100‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ .[Eject‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Doc Count Check Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬

‫] ‪[Function/Enter‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫‪6 6‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Counter Reset‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] ‪Doc‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ [Count Check Mode‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪. 5‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Stop‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‪[Doc Count Check Mode‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Ready‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ 100‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ , 4‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ 25-‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]‪ [-‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫]‪ [Count‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪."25‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 25‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ 100‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪100‬‬

‫‪ , 4‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪.0 -/+‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]=[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫]‪ [Count‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪."0‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ 100‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪110‬‬

‫‪ , 4‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ 10+‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]‪ [+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫]‪ [Count‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ ."0‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟـ ‪100‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ"‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺤﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ"‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Information‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫■ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Information‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Information‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻁﻠﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ‬ ‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻬﻼﻛﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬

‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪/Pause‬‬ ‫‪/Back‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %95‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬
‫‪) .Operation Panel‬ﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %100‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬
‫]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) .Software Operation Panel‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫‪iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ .%33‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﺜﺒﺘًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻟـ‬
‫]‪[Ink Level: Front] / [Ink Level: Back‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ]‪.[Information‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻬﻼﻛﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ "‪ 6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(92‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ "‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ " )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(94‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ "‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(97‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ )ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ( ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺗﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﻓﻭﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ([ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ :4‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (163‬ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Clear pattern :4‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫‪.Panel‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 12‬ﻣﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺑﻁﺎء‬ ‫‪ :3‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺑﻁﻲء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ :4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺭﻓﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ )ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :5‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﻭ ‪ 30‬ﻭ ‪ 40‬ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﻭ ‪ 70‬ﻭ ‪ 80‬ﻭ ‪ 90‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻭ ‪ 110‬ﻭ ‪ 120‬ﻭ ‪ 180‬ﻭ ‪ 240‬ﻭ ‪ 300‬ﻭ ‪ 360‬ﻭ ‪ 420‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 480‬ﻭ ‪ 540‬ﻭ ‪ 600‬ﻭ ‪ 900‬ﻭ ‪ 1200‬ﻭ ‪ 1500‬ﻭ ‪ 1800‬ﻭ‬
‫‪) 1999‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:2‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﻭ ‪) 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :6‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻧﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻌﺩ( ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ :1‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ]‪ :3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[‬
‫ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ .Software Operation Panel‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .Software Operation Panel‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ‬ ‫‪ :7‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[Disable :1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ(‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Enable(Detect) :2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Enable(Ignore) :3‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ .[Eject‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ]‪ ،[Enable(Detect :2‬ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ]‪ ،[Enable(Ignore) :3‬ﻻ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪ :8‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺫﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫)*‪(1‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :9‬ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‬

‫‪ :2‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫)*‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Manual (Continuous) :1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ :10‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4‬ﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ]‪ [Lower :4‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪ :11‬ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(24‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪2.0‬‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 1.5‬ﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻭ ‪) 2.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺇﻧﺫﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :12‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺫﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :13‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 0.01‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻗﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :14‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﻭ ‪ 30‬ﻭ ‪ 40‬ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﻭ ‪60‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :15‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 90‬ﻭ ‪ 120‬ﻭ ‪ 150‬ﻭ ‪ 180‬ﻭ ‪ 210‬ﻭ ‪ 240‬ﻭ ‪ 270‬ﻭ ‪300‬‬ ‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [ON‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺭ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2.0‬‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﻭ ‪ 1.0‬ﻭ ‪ 1.5‬ﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻭ ‪) 2.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪ :16‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ‪LED‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :17‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺑﻁﻲء‬
‫‪ :4‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻣﻥ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﺃﻭ ] ‪Paper‬‬ ‫‪ :18‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪.[Separation Force‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﺃﻭ ] ‪Paper‬‬
‫‪ [Separation Force‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Eject‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[Ready‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Hopper Level‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Paper Separation Force‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Ready‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :19‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :4‬ﺍﻷﻟﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺍﻹﻳﻁﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :6‬ﺍﻹﺳﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :7‬ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻳُﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :20‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Paper Protection :1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Clear :2‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :21‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫)*‪(3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :22‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪(4*) :‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪L)ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX ) :1‬‬
‫‪YZ[¥]^_`00000000‬‬
‫‪L)abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}¯0000 ) :2‬‬
‫‪0000‬‬
‫‪L)!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ) :3‬‬
‫‪00000000‬‬
‫‪P)ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX ) :4‬‬
‫‪YZ[¥]^_`00000000‬‬
‫‪P)abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}¯0000 ) :5‬‬
‫‪0000‬‬
‫‪P)!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ ) :6‬‬
‫‪00000000‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻧﻌﻡ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻻ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫‪ :23‬ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫)ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫)*‪(5‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻧﻌﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ :24‬ﻓﺗﺢ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ" ﻭ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ :25‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ]‪ [Information‬ﻛﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Movable :1‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Lower :4‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ [Multiple sheets :2] :‬ﻟـ ]‪ [No. of sheets scanned‬ﻭ ]‪ [Front Side :1‬ﻟـ ]‪ [Print‬ﻭ ]‪:1‬‬
‫)‪ [L)ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[|]^_’00000000‬ﻟـ ]‪ [Print Pattern‬ﻭ ]‪ [Yes :1‬ﻟـ ]‪ .[Test Print‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :4‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Print: 1: Front Side / 2: Back Side‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺗﻡ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :5‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [No :2‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ 3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Function/Enter‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[Function Selection‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪.[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ]‪ [F01‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪.[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Function Selection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪[Function/Enter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ" ) ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(63‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Menu‬‬ ‫‪Function‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ "‪."F02‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ No.C‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .Software Operation Panel‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪/Pause‬‬ ‫‪/Back‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ،No.C‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ "‪."SOP‬‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[] / [‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Function/Enter‬‬ ‫‪Scan‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬

‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫)*‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪No.C / 50‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪.[Send to/Pause‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ‪ No.C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )]‪ [Send to 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.([Send to 50‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ .(73‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [No.01‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 4‬ﻁﺭﻕ ّ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺧﺹ ‪65.........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4.2‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪66........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4.3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪69 ..........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4.4‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪73 .....................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 4‬ﻁﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮّﻋﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ 4.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﻬﺮﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪" ‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(66‬‬
‫‪" ‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪)"A3‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(68‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪" ‬ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(69‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫‪" ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(73‬‬
‫‪" ‬ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(75‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻁﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫‪ 4.2‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣّﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺬﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺟ ّﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(42‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.1‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(30‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪A3‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،A3‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻁﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 863‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 34‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪300‬‬
‫‪ dpi‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪ 4.3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ"‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ّﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪًﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻟـ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ([Send to/Pause‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻷﻅﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻲ ﻛﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻅﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫‪.Panel‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] ‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ [Reset‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.(17‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ]‪Manual :1] ← [Hopper Level :10] ← [Main Menu‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ [(Continuous‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪.Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ"‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [(Manual (Continuous‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ] ‪Hopper‬‬

‫‪ [Level‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"‪1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(21‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪71‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] ‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ [Reset‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software‬‬
‫‪.Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Hopper Level :10‬ﻓﻲ ] ‪Main‬‬
‫‪ [Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ]‪ [Lower :4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫‪.Panel‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[Continuous Feed‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ‬

‫ﺇﻻ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪ 4.4‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺻّﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ,‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ" ﻣﻦ "ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ← ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ]ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪) [Scan‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪([Scan‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫]‪ [Send to 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Send to 50‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪([Send to/Pause‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟًﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Send to‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ[ ﺿﻤﻦ ]ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Send to/Pause‬‬

‫‪/Enter‬‬

‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Scan‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Scan‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ]‪ [Send to/Pause‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )]‪ [Send to 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ] ‪Send to‬‬
‫‪.([50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "F02‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﻟـ ]‪.[Send to 02‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Send to/Pause‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ]ً‪،[Send to/Pause‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(62‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ "ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻅﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﻞ‬
‫"ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(169‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻣﺰﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻣﺰﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) 2‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Eject‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .([iMFF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻫﻮ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬

‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ] ‪Ready‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬
‫)‪[(Multifeed‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Eject‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪(1*) .‬‬
‫‪Send to Check‬‬
‫‪/Pause‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪/Back‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬
‫‪Stop‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Scan‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Eject‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[iMFF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Eject‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[Ready‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻁﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫"ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪".‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [iMFF‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[iMFF‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫‪.Panel‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻁﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪(2*)(1*) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) 2‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪(2*) .‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻁﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [iMFF‬ﻭﺯﺭ‬
‫]‪ [Counter Reset‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ .LCD‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻁﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[iMFF Setting :1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨًﺎ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟّﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪79 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ( ‪81....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ( ‪83 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﺸﺒّﻊ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻞ‪/‬ﺯﺟﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪PA03950-‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪Cleaner F1‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0352‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺵ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪Cleaner‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺤﺔ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻁﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪/F1‬ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ )ﻛﻞ ‪ 10,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻛﻞ ‪ 10,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻁﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪CA99501-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬

‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪.A4‬‬ ‫‪0016‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬

‫‪ 24‬ﺭﺯﻣﺔ‪/‬ﻋﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪PA03950-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪Cleaner‬‬ ‫‪0419‬‬
‫‪ .F1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻁﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪.Cleaner F1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺴﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ : ‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺃﻣﻠﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪/‬ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.8‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(22‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(79‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨًﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Menu‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Cleaning :21‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫]‪ [Function/Enter‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ])‪ [Cleaning (Sheet‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.B4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Stop‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋ ّﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Show/Clear Counters :23‬ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(140‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬

‫‪ 12‬ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Scan‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 14‬ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ(‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪ Cleaner F1‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪ Cleaner F1‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨًﺎ ﺟﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﻀﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(21‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(15‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(94‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪/ADF‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪1.5‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) "ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(18‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(20‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪ 5 :‬ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ × ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(97‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ )ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ × ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﻥ × ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪/‬ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬

‫ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﻥ × ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪ 6 :‬ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ × ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻔﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﺴﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺭﻗﺘﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ )ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴ ًﺨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺭﻗﺘﺎﻥ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﺴﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ )ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴ ًﺨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ‪ 9 :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ )ﻭﺣﺪﺗﺎﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ‪ 9 :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪/ADF‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.4‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪1.5‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) "ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(18‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(20‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋ ّﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Show/Clear Counters :23‬ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Main Menu‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(140‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨًﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫‪ 6.1‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ‪91........................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ 6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪92 ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ‪94 ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‪97 ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪ 6.1‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬

‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺧﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 8.3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(139‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﺷﺩﻙ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪) A4‬ﺑﻭﺯﻥ ‪ 80‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ ]‪ 20‬ﺭﻁﻝ[( ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪ 600,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪PA03575-K011‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺷﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪ 600,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪PA03575-K012‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬

‫ﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ )ﺧﻼ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ( ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ( ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪ 600,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪PA03575-K013‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪ 6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻜﺮﺗﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻛﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻛﺭﺗﻳﻥ( ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻛﺭﺗﻳﻥ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻊ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻜﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻁﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬

‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"‪1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) "ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(18‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻁﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬


‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(21‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬

‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻁﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪97‬‬


‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌ ّﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(140‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 7‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﻓﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺛﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7.1‬ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪100.................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7.2‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪102..........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪109 ...............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪123.........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪125 ...................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 7‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 7.1‬ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪/ADF‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺷﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﺍﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺗﻙ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﺩﺓ( ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺷﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺷﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ADF‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪/ADF‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ gap،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) "ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(18‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(20‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪/ADF‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ,‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) "ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(18‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ"‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻼﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺑﺎﺑﻳﺱ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻳﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺣﻳﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻳﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿّﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪. 4‬‬
‫ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ‪ Error Recovery Guide‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Setup DVD-ROM‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ ، Error Recovery Guide‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ" ﻓﻲ "ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪ 7.2‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺭﻑ "‪ "J‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "U‬ﻟﻸﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ "‪ "E‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "F‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "C‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "H‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "L‬ﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [Clear/Back‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]‪ .[Stop‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ "ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪.([Ready‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ( ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ‬ ‫" ّ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫‪/Enter‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ]‪[Clear/Back‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ .[Ready‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Send to Check‬‬
‫‪/Pause‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪/Back‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪".‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪Check LED‬‬ ‫‪Stop‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿّﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ]‪[Stop‬‬ ‫‪Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(24‬‬ ‫‪iMFF‬‬
‫‪Counter‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ Setup DVD-ROM‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪.Error Recovery Guide‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ ،Error Recovery Guide‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ" ﻓﻲ "ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ Error Recovery Guide‬ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪ Error Recovery Guide‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ .Windows‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪ Error Recovery Guide‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )ﺭﻗﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩِﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻣُﺟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪J0:52‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."J‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"‪2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪J1:31‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﻈّﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J1:32‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J1:34‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫‪J1:35‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫‪J1:3A‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪J3:54‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪J1:3B‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬ ‫‪J1:3C‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J1:3D‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ّ 3‬‬
‫‪J1:3E‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺟﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Eject‬ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬ ‫‪J2:55‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪J1:50‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[‬‬ ‫"‪2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪(1*) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪J0:51‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪(1*) .‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻴﻊ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"‪2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪J8:06‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Eject‬ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬ ‫‪J2:55‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪5‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪J8:07‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪J9:61‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪(1*) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺎﻭﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ iMFF‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬ ‫‪J9:64‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‪/‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪[‬‬
‫"‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (94‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪(1*) .‬‬
‫"‪6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(97‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻁﻭﻝ(‬ ‫‪J2:56‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Eject‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[Ready‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪".‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪J8:01‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪J8:02‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪J8:05‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪5‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻧﺎﻗﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫■ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."U‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻣﺟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."E‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪U4:40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ADF‬‬ ‫)‪(*1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪U4:41‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ‪SCSI‬‬ ‫‪E8:8E‬‬ ‫)‪(*1‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﺑﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪U6:B4‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ‪EEPROM‬‬ ‫‪E7:D2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪U6:BA‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪E6:D3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﻘﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬ ‫‪E5:EB‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪E9:F5‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪E9:F6‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."F‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪E9:F7‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻲء ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‬ ‫‪F0:C0‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪E9:F8‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪E2:74‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‬ ‫‪F1:C1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪E3:75‬‬
‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪F4:C2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪F4:C3‬‬

‫ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪F6:EC‬‬

‫‪106‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."H‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."C‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪H7:84‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪C0:E5‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ FUJITSU .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪C0:E6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪H7:85‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ‪) LSI‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪C0:E9‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪H1:80‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫‪H2:81‬‬
‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪H2:82‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪H5:86‬‬
‫‪H8:88‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ‪) LSI‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪C0:EA‬‬
‫‪H9:89‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫‪H1:8A‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪H1:8B‬‬
‫‪H3:8C‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪C8:F0‬‬
‫‪H4:8D‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫‪C8:F2‬‬
‫‪H2:8F‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪H2:90‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ‪SPC‬‬ ‫‪C6:EF‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻧﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ‪24‬‬ ‫‪H9:91‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪C6:F9‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪H6:B1‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮ‬ ‫■ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﺜﺒﺘًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."L‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻑ "‪."A‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬ ‫‪L0:11‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺧﺮﻁﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪A0:B2‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﱢ ﻥ ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫‪L1:12‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ‬ ‫‪L2:13‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫‪L3:14‬‬ ‫‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪L4:15‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪L5:17‬‬ ‫ﻓﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬
‫‪L6:1B‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ(‬ ‫‪A1:B3‬‬
‫‪L7:1C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪A2:B5‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )‪(EEPROM‬‬ ‫‪A3:B6‬‬

‫ﺧﻁﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫‪A4:B8‬‬

‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪A2:BB‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫‪ 7.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎ ًء ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (123‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫"ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(110‬‬
‫"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) ".LCD‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(111‬‬
‫"ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(112‬‬
‫"ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(113‬‬
‫"ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(114‬‬
‫"ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭّ ﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(115‬‬
‫"ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(116‬‬
‫"ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(117‬‬
‫"ﻣﻭﻗﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪".ADF‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(119‬‬
‫"ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(120‬‬
‫"ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(121‬‬
‫"ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻅﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪) ".‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(122‬‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺻّﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺻّﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ]|[ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ؟‬

‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ "‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ؟‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﻣّﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧ ّﻔﺫ ﺃﻣﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ "‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺻّﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻭﺻّﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪ ,‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ" ﻣﻥ "ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻁﻝ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻭﺻﱢﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ‪ ،SCSI‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ‪ SCSI‬ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ‪ ,SCSI‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ]ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ[ ﻣﻥ "ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪(SCSI‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ "‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (123‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻔﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪(1*).‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ "ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﺻﻔﻳﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ"؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻧﻅﻳﻑ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (123‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺎ ً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ "ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ" )ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻴّﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻔﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋ ًﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ([ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪(1*).‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ([؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ؟‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻭﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻌﻴّﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ([‪.‬‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻣﺩﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ؟ ﻫﻝ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭ؟ ﻭﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺭ ّﻛﺑﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ؟‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﻛﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،ADF‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫"‪5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (81‬ﺃﻭ "‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(83‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ؟‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﻭﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻳﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿّﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫"ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪?(36‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ"‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(40‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻧﻁﺎ ًﻗﺎ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ )"ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.((165‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻧﺎﺳﺧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻳﺯﺭ؟‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻥ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺯﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 5‬ﻛﻎ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪.(1‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ؟‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (81‬ﺃﻭ "‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(83‬‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(24‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (123‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ" ‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ" ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻭﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻳﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿّﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ "ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪?(36‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ؟‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ"‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (81‬ﺃﻭ "‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(83‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ"‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ"‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺔ؟‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(24‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋ ًﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 5.2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ(" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (81‬ﺃﻭ "‪ 5.3‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ("‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(83‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ )*‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺔ؟‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(90‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺃﻭﻓﺳﺕ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ[؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﻓﺳﺕ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(143‬‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻅﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﻓﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﻓﺳﺕ )ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ(؟‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﻓﺳﺕ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(143‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ [2‬ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﺊ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭّ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )‪) "[(ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(145‬‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ 7.4‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬

‫ﺭﺟﺎ ًء ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫■ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬

‫)‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪fi-6400/fi-6800 :‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(125‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪000001 :‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(125‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Adaptec SCSI AHA-2940AU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪) 09-2009 :‬ﺳﺑﺗﻣﺑﺭ ‪(2009‬‬
‫■ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(125‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ َﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺿﻣﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ؟‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪fi-680PRF :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ A.4‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(182‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫■ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ ‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺱ؟‬ ‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Adaptec SCSI AHA-2940AU‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫)‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪dpi, 75 dpi 600 :‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪124‬‬
‫‪ 7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃ )ﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‪ُ :‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺏ )ﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‪ُ :‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪127 .................................................................................................................. Software Operation Panel‬‬

‫‪ 8.2‬ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ‪128 .........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪139..........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.4‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪143 ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪163..................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ‪170...........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪172 .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 8.8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪173.......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪126‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation Panel‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ]‪.[FUJITSU Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ Software Operation Panel (SOP‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ) ‪PaperStream‬‬
‫‪ (IP/TWAIN/ISIS‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺻّﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(15‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ← ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ← ]‪[Scanner Utility for Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫← ]‪.[Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪ 8.2‬ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪128‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ / (ADF‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ‪ /‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫)ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪ 5 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 235‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ )ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ(‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)*‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ[‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ‪ 4 /‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ 8 /‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻓﺭﻋﻲ‪ 0 :‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ‪/‬ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻓﺭﻋﻲ‪ 2- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ‬

‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪0%‬‬ ‫ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ 3.1- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) %3.1‬ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(%0.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟـ "ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪129‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫‪fi-6800‬‬ ‫‪fi-6400‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪PAxxxxx-Bxx1‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪PAxxxxx-Bxx2 /Bxx3 /Bxx5 /Bxx7‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .7.5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ")ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(125‬‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software Operation‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ Panel‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.[2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪131‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ :-‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﻼ ‪ /‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ( ‪ /‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 20/15/10‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻳﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ‪ /‬ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ‪ /‬ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪/‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ 7- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﻣﺵ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫)‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ :B ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ :A+B ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ‪ /‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ‪ /‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ /‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻭ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫‪132‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻡ ‪ /‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻟﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪/‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪/‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7.5‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻠﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]ﻛﺷﻑ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫)‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ :B ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ :A+B ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ )ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻭﺳﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ[(‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 510‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺩء‪ :‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﻝ )ﻣﻡ(‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 510‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫)ﻣﻡ( ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪133‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪ /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‬
‫)ﻓﻭﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ([ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫"ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (163‬ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ[‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )‪(VRS‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ([‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪134‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 10,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1,000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(1,000‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪[.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 600,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠَﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 10,000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2,550,000‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(10,000‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ‪ -‬ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻳّﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻼً‬
‫ﺯﻣﻧﻳًﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺑﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺭﻓﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ )ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻑ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻝ( ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪135‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ‪ /‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ( ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫)ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬

‫ٍ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﻭ ‪ 30‬ﻭ ‪ 40‬ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﻭ ‪ 70‬ﻭ ‪ 80‬ﻭ ‪ 90‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻭ ‪ 110‬ﻭ ‪ 120‬ﻭ ‪ 180‬ﻭ ‪ 240‬ﻭ ‪ 300‬ﻭ ‪ 360‬ﻭ ‪ 420‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 480‬ﻭ ‪ 540‬ﻭ ‪ 600‬ﻭ ‪ 900‬ﻭ ‪ 1200‬ﻭ ‪ 1500‬ﻭ ‪ 1800‬ﻭ‬
‫‪) 1999‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﻭ ‪) 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪136‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻧﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ )ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ( ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪:2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺗﻡ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪137‬‬

‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪ 0 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء‪ 5- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ‪ /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪ 1 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﺷﻬﺭً ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﺫ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ /‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻟﻭ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺍﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ]ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﺭﻓﻳﻊ )ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻣﻳﻙ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫‪(3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪138‬‬
‫‪ 8.3‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌ ّﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫■ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪّﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻣًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﻳﻐﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %95‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .%100‬ﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪/‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %100‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (142‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Software‬‬
‫‪) .Operation Panel‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ .%33‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪) .‬ﻟـ ]‪([Ink Level: Front] / [Ink Level: Back‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﻣﻥ ‪ 10‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪(ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫)ﻣﻥ ‪ 50‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻧﺫ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪139‬‬
‫■ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪّﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻧﺫ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Clear‬ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻧﺫ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.0‬‬

‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.100‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﺩّﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ "‪ 6.3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(94‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ "‪ 6.4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(97‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Software Operation Panel‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(78‬‬
‫■ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻧﻧﺻﺣﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ "‪ 6.2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(92‬‬
‫‪141‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %95‬ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %100‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .%100‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪. (141‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪. (141‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ )ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﺑﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1,000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255,000‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪.1,000‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 10,000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2,550,000‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪.10,000‬‬
‫‪142‬‬
‫‪ 8.4‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬

‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺃﻭﻓﺳﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻭﻓﺳﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ )ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻬﻳّﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪143‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.[ADF‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ(‬

‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ -3.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ %3.1‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ %0.1‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) ADF‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ([ ﺃﻭ ]‪) ADF‬ﺧﻠﻑ([ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬

‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻻ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟـ ]‪) ADF‬ﺧﻠﻑ([ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 2-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺭﻋﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 2-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪144‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻠﺅﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ّ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )‪[(ADF‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻌﻛﺱ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ :T‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﻣﺎﻟﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ" ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 7-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ :R‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ :L‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪.[(ADF‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻣﻌﺑﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻔﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء" ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬
‫‪145‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺵ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺑﺋﺔ؛ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ّ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ([‬
‫‪ :T‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7.5‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻌﻛﺱ‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7.5‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7.5‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﻣﺎﻟﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ" ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :L‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ = ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7.5‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ([‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻣﻌﺑﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻔﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ)‪ .[ (ADF‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭّ ﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ]ﻣﺯﻳﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪) "[(ADF‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(145‬‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻭ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ]ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ"‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺹ ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺣﺔ )ﻣﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﻣﺗﺭﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪147‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ]ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺹ ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪148‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ [1‬ﻭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ [2‬ﻭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪[3‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺮﺏ[‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ [3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪] -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ[ ‪] /‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ[ ‪] /‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ[‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[] / [‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻮﺩ[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺣﺮﻑ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ 15 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (*.bmp‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ[‪ ،‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ]ﺑﺩﻭﻥ[ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Kofax VRS‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ[‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ[‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﺟﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬ ‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ "ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ[ ﻳﻘﺻّﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭ ]ﻻ[ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ[‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻳّﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻼً ﺯﻣﻧﻳًﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ] ← [2‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ])ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﻗﺻﻳﺭ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ )ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪151‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺑﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ‪ :‬ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪152‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻁﻳﻑ[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ] ← [2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻁﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺇﺑﻁﺎﻝ[ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪153‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺹ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻣﺣﺳﻥ[ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻟﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁﺎ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ" ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﺣﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﺣﺳﻥ[ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪154‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻪ[‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.255‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ :‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ٍ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺻﻭﺕ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪155‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺣﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪156‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ "ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﻻﺳﻳﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺄء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺯﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻧﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫"ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ" ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻣﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻧ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻧﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪157‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ]ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‬

‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻌﺩ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ :1‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ]‪ :3‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪158‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫]ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ([‬
‫ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺑﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 120‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ([‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(39‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،2‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.A5‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ]ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪159‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺗﻡ ]ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺗﻡ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Kofax VRS‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ]ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪160‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ]ﻗﻁﻊ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪/‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ 5-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪/‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻧﺩﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Kofax VRS‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪161‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ[‬
‫]ﻣﺣﺳﻥ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ]ﻣﺣﺳﻥ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻭﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺛﺧﻳﻥ[ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻣﺣﺳﻥ[‬

‫ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ]ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ[ ﻟﻠﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺄﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Kofax VRS‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫‪162‬‬
‫‪ 8.5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻫﻭ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ "ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ" ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﻭﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻭﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (166‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪(75‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ )ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([ ﻭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 20/15/10‬ﻣﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻛﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪163‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ)ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻛﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ)ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻳّﻥ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪164‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪(.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫‪165‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ )ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭّ ﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺳﻁ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ[ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻧﻪ‬

‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ "‪ ،"0‬ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ)ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻭﺳﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ)ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻭﺳﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻟﻼﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 510‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء > ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻭﺳﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻭﺳﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪ 0 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 510‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء > ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪166‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ]ﺑﺩء[ ﻭ ]ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"0‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 200‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻁﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻣ ّﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺇﺑﻁﺎﻝ[ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻠﻰ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 200‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ :‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 200‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫]ﺇﺑﻁﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻪ; ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪167‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪) :3‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 310‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 400‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 320‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 450‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 100‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 102‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ = ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩء = ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪300‬‬ ‫‪300‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ( ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪168‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ([ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ "ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ["‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ (163‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ] ← [2‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Scan‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Kofax VRS‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ]‪.‬ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )‪[(VRS‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ([‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﺫﻛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(75‬‬
‫‪169‬‬
‫‪ 8.6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣّﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Counter Reset‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪170‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 235‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ )ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳّﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ"‪ 8.1‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Software Operation Panel‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(127‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 8/4/2/1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪171‬‬
‫‪ 8.7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ[‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺗﺫﻛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪172‬‬
‫‪ 8.8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ[‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ[‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﺑﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪173‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋﻳّﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪] ← [2‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ A.4‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(182‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫ﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪174‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪176 .........................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ A.2‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪178 ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A.3‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ‪180 ..............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A.4‬ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪182 ..............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A.5‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪183 ..........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪175‬‬
‫‪ A.1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪ ADF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪)2 × CCD‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ × ‪) 4‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪) 74 × 52‬ﻣﻢ( ‪) 2.91 × 2.05 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( )ﻁﻮﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫)*‪(1‬‬ ‫‪) 431.8 × 304.8‬ﻣﻢ( ‪) 17.0 × 12.0 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬

‫)‪ A3‬ﻁﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪) 420 × 297‬ﻣﻢ( ‪) 16.5 × 11.7 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( (‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ A5‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ A4/Letter ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬

‫‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 5.4) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،A5‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪A4/Letter:‬‬
‫‪ 41‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 209‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 11) 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 56‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬
‫‪dpi 300 / 200‬‬ ‫‪ 100 :‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﻴﻦ ‪ 200 :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪/‬ﻕ )‪(fi-6400‬‬ ‫)‪ ،A4‬ﻋﺮﺿﻲ()*‪(2‬‬
‫‪ 130 :‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﻴﻦ ‪ 260 :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪/‬ﻕ )‪(fi-6800‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪80 :‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 20) 2‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪ 500‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ )*‪(3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 5 :‬ﻛﻎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺃﻗﻞ[‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪dpi 600‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪dpi 1‬‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪dpi 1200 ،dpi 600‬‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ dpi 1200‬ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪176‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑـ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻨًﺎ‬ ‫‪ SCSI‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )‪(fi-6800‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ )*‪(5*)(4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪B‬‬ ‫)‪USB 2.0/1.1 (*6‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪) FSTN :‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪65 × 110 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪) 5 × 16 :‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ x‬ﺻﻒ(‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3048‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 120‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻁﻮﻟﻬﺎ ‪ 432‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 17‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 863‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 34‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ dpi 400‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻁﻮﻟﻬﺎ ‪ 863‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 34‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 3048‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 120‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ dpi 300‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻁﻮﻟﻬﺎ ‪ 432‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 17‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ dpi 400‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 2.2‬ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(36‬‬
‫*‪ :4‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ SCSI‬ﻭ ‪ USB 2.0/1.1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :5‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.USB 1.1‬‬ ‫*‪ :6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .USB 2.0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻳ ً‬
‫‪177‬‬
‫‪ A.2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪) 310 × 452 × 460‬ﻣﻢ( ‪) 12.2 × 17.8 × 18.1 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ()*‪(1‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫)‪600 (23.6‬‬
‫)‪200 (7.9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬ ‫)‪200 (7.9‬‬
‫)‪600 (23.6‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻛﻎ )‪ 70.5‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪%10 ±‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪ ±3 50/60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪178‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪ 4.0‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 120‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:2‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 15 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ °35‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ 41‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ °95‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 20- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪˚60‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ 4-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ˚140‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 20 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪%80‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 8 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪%95‬‬
‫‪ 172‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪ 3.5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 120‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ SCSI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:2‬‬

‫‪ 39‬ﻛﻎ )‪ 86.0‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )*‪(2‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬

‫*‪ :2‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪179‬‬
‫‪ A.3‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪684 (26.9‬‬
‫)‪394 (15.5‬‬
‫)‪571 (22.5‬‬
‫)‪699 (27.5‬‬
‫)‪754 (29.7‬‬
‫)‪310 (12.2‬‬
‫)‪8.5 (0.3‬‬
‫)‪430 (16.9‬‬
‫)‪460 (18.1‬‬ ‫)‪452 (17.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪684 (26.9‬‬
‫)‪394 (15.5‬‬
‫)‪571 (22.5‬‬
‫)‪699 (27.5‬‬
‫)‪754 (29.7‬‬
‫)‪344 (13.5‬‬
‫)‪310 (12.2‬‬
‫)‪8,5 (0.3‬‬
‫)‪430 (16.9‬‬
‫)‪460 (18.1‬‬ ‫)‪452 (17.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪181‬‬
‫‪ A.4‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻈﺒﻊ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PA03575-D201‬‬ ‫‪FI-680PRF‬‬ ‫‪fi-680PRF‬‬

‫ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪) fi-680PRF‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻈﺒﻊ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PA03575-D203‬‬ ‫‪FI-680PRB‬‬ ‫‪fi-680PRB‬‬

‫ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪) fi-680PRF‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪."fi-680PRF/PRB‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ fi-series‬ﻣﻦ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬ ‫‪PA03575-K301‬‬ ‫‪FI-680CGA‬‬ ‫‪fi-680CGA‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ "‪ "Kofax VRS Professional‬ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VRS option‬‬
‫)‪(fi-6800‬‬ ‫) ‪Kofax VRS‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪ FUJITSU‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ‪.FUJITSU‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ‪ fi-680PRF‬ﻭ ‪ fi-680PRB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪182‬‬
‫‪ A.5‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪:ISIS (fi-6800‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[ISIS Driver Bundle Installer for fi Series scanners‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:Error Recovery Guide‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[Error Recovery Guide for fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪[Software Operation Panel‬‬
‫)‪ Software Operation Panel‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪.(TWAIN/ISIS‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:Kofax VRS‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[Kofax VRS‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[fi-Scanner manuals fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ← ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ← ] ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ™‪:Quick Scan Pro‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ[‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[Quick Scan‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Scanner Central Admin Agent‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.Scanner Central Admin 4.0‬‬ ‫‪] ‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ[‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:Adobe Acrobat‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪] ‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ[‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[Adobe Acrobat Standard‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ[ ←ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ[‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ "Image Processing Software Option‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪) Image Processing Software Option‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:TWAIN‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ‪.[Microsoft Windows‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪:ScandAll PRO (fi-6800‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[Fujitsu ScandAll PRO‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ،ScandAll PRO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Scan to Microsoft SharePoint‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪:Scan to Microsoft SharePoint (fi-6800‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.[Microsoft SharePoint‬‬
‫‪183‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺼﺮﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ّﺮﻑ ‪SCSI‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 17 × 11‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ADF‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪) CCD‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ( ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A6‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ‬ ‫‪dpi‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A7‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫‪Energy Star‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A8‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪FCC‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪Letter‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪) iMFF‬ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ISIS‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪) OCR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺼﺮﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪SCSI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪) SEE‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪TÜV‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪) TWAIN‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺠﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪184‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 17 × 11‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ 17 × 11‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪ADF‬‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CCD‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ( ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺤﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺤﻮّﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ CCD‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪dpi‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟـ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ"‪ .‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "dpi‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Energy Star‬‬
‫‪ ENERGY STAR‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ EPA‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .1992‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪FCC‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﺮﺍﻟﻴﺔ"؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩًﺍ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺸﻌﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪) iMFF‬ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫‪185‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ISIS‬‬
‫‪ ISIS‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (Image Scanner Interface Specification‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ API‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (Application Program Interface‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،Captiva‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ )‪ EMC Corporation (Pixel Translations‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1990‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،ISIS‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪.ISIS‬‬
‫‪) OCR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺼﺮﻳًﺎ(‬

‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SCSI‬‬
‫‪) SCSI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪/MB 10‬ﺙ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ SCSI‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭ ‪/MB 20‬ﺙ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ SCSI‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SEE‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬

‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TÜV‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) TWAIN‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ(‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ API‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (Application Program Interface‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ .TWAIN Working Group‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ TWAIN‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪186‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (Universal Serial Bus‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 127‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ ،USB 2.0‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ; ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 480‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ ،USB 1.1‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ; ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ( ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺇﺯﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺉ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺟﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5 × 5‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ .400/1‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪187‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫‪188‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘّﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻭﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪.ADF‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘّﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ .ADF‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮّﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻁﻮﺑﺔ( ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪189‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻀﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺠﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء( ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ )ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ‪ 256‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺼﺮﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪190‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ .ADF‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ "ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪.OCR‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻔﻲ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ( ﻫﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﺍﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻋﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻬﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪191‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ( ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻏﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،1‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﺌﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪًﺍ ﻣﺸﻮّﻩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪192‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ( ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻧﻘﺎء( ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ – ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪193‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻁﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﺊ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻞء ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻁﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪194‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺷﺮﻁﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﺮﻁﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 15‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬

‫"ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪".‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ‬
‫‪195‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪196‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﻳﻜﻮّﻥ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ "ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌ ّﺮﻑ ‪SCSI‬‬

‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ SCSI‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻫﺪﻓًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺩﺉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪A4‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ 297 × 210‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪197‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪Letter‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ 11 × 8.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ADF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪) .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬

‫ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫‪198‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪15 ............. ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪174 ......... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪73 .............................................................................................,Send to/Pause‬‬
‫‪146 ............................................................................................. ,Page Edge Filler‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪56 ...... ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪92 . ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪92 ........... ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪79 ...... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫‪28 ...................................................................................... ,Scanner Central Admin‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪49 ..... ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺧﺹ‪65 ............ ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪177 .............................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪11 ... ................................................................................................,‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ‪91 ........................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪101 .... ................................................................................................,‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪93 .............................................................................................. ,‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻑ‪98 .............................................................................................. ,‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‪95 .............................................................................................. ,‬‬
‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪100 ................... ................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪184 ............................................................................................. ,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪181 .. ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪16 ...... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪12 . ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‪28 ....................................................................................... ,‬‬
‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪25 ................. ................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪5 ........ ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪128 ............................................................,Software Operation Panel‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪127 .............................................................................................. ,‬‬
‫ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‪171 .... ................................................................................................,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪164 ..... ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪173 .........................................................,‬‬
‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪174 ..................................................................................... ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪144 ....................................................................................... ,‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪62 ...... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩّﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‪140 ............. ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪30 ... ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪80 .................................................................................... ,‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪) ADF‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ(‪84 ....................................................,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪26 ......................................................................................,‬‬
‫‪199‬‬
‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﺥ‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪2 ............................................................................................. ,‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪183 . ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪20 ........................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪17 ............................................................................................... ,‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪19 ............................................................... ,ADF‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪29 ............................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‪73 ........... ................................................................................................ ,Scan‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪20 ............................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﺑﺊ‪22 ....... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪44 ....... ................................................................................................,‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪21 .........................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ‪36 .... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭّ ﻋﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪64 ...................................................................................... ,‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪42 ............ ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪66 ........... ................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪198 .. ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪129 .............................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪3 ................. ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪126 ... ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪80 ....... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪179 ...............................................................................................,‬‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ‪17 ......... ................................................................................................,‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪103 ............. ................................................................ ,‬‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪18 ......... ................................................................,ADF‬‬
‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪10 ......................................................................................... ,‬‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‪124 ............ ................................................................ ,‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪24 .... ................................................................................................ ,‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪fi-6400/fi-6800‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫‪P3PC-2492-07ARZ0‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2017‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ‪PFU Limited :‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ PFU Limited‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻁﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

P3PC 2492 07arz0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P3PC 2492 07arz0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫‪P3PC-2492-07ARZ0‬‬

‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

Windows (32/64-bit) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard

Windows 7 (32/64-bit) Windows® 7 Home Premium

‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(32/64-bit) Windows® 10 Home‬‬

‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪(64-bit) Windows Server® 2016 Standard‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪SharePoint‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft® Office SharePoint® Portal Server 2003‬‬

‫‪Microsoft® Office SharePoint® Server 2007‬‬

‫‪Microsoft® SharePoint® Server 2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪11 ................................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻣﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ‪) VRS Board‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ( ‪fi-6800‬‬

‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪(fi-6800) SCSI‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪(fi-6800) SCSI ID‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،SCSI‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Ready‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬

‫‪ ‬ﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ 1.5‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ADF‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ADF‬‬

‫‪ 1.6‬ﻓﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‬

‫‪ 1.7‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬

‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬

‫‪Scan‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫*‪ :1‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 80‬ﻍ‪/‬ﻡ‪ 20) 2‬ﺭﻁﻼً(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌﺒﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺩﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬

‫‪ 1.9‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬

‫‪Send to Check‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬

‫‪ 1.10‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ " 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(15‬‬

‫‪ 1.11‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫‪ 1.12‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﺣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫‪ 2.1‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‪30 ................................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫■ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺪﺱ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬

‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻟﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺷﻕ ﺗﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃ ‪ 52 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 304.8‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 2.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬

‫ﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ(‬

‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﻘﻭﺑﺔ‬